executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
40e857ea
DL
19** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
20suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
21
c08398de
DL
22** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
23buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
24contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
25by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
26insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
27the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
28Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
29
0b8a3a6d
DL
30** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
31environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
32
33** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
34point in a pop-up window.
35
36** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
37displays all characters in that character set.
38
39** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
40coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
41
5cb6a58e
SM
42** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
43on the context.
44
a1b8d58b
GM
45** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
46
6e417ca5
DL
47** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
48been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
49
5898e075
DL
50** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
51`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
52indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
53indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
54
abfcc168
GM
55** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
56sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 57(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
58You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
59
cc181e95
GM
60** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
61on the display using several methods
62
63- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
64a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
65be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
66
67- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
68equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
69
da4496b6 70- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
71
72- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
73the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
74
0daee095 75** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
76an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
77command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
78does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 79
176256a1 80** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
81`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
82typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 83
dd0add8e
DL
84** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
85characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
86
699238d9
GM
87** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
88compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
89this behavior.
90
91The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
92compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
93Emacs dump core.
94
95** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 96
7233c5bd
GM
97*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
98whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
99is useful for debugging X problems.
100
101Example:
102
699238d9 103 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 104
100b3cbb
GM
105*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
106visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
107the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
108and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
109visual class names are
110
111 TrueColor
112 PseudoColor
113 DirectColor
114 StaticColor
115 GrayScale
116 StaticGray
117
118Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
119`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
120meaning.
121
122The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
123supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
124`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
125visual.
126
127Example:
128
699238d9 129 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
130
131*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
132specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
133default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
134resource values are `true' or `on'.
135
136Example:
137
699238d9 138 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 139
0d0c76b8
EZ
140** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
141more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
142now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
143
42088c12 144** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 145display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
146shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
147be customized.
c60ea02e 148
31047e0d
DL
149** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
150
b02786f9
GM
151** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
152all frames except the selected one.
153
3261c1d8
DL
154** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
155to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
156
ffe36136
GM
157** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
158the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
159area or with tooltips.
160
559cee90
DL
161** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
162read mail from the menu etc.
163
271b4185
GM
164** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
165a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
166
0daee095
GM
167** Changes in Texinfo mode.
168
169** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
170macros
171
172 Key binding Macro
173 -------------------------
174 C-c C-c C-s @strong
175 C-c C-c C-e @emph
176 C-c C-c u @url
177 C-c C-c q @quotation
178 C-c C-c m @email
179
559cee90
DL
180** Changes in Outline mode.
181
182There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
183`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
184the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
185
404fa7d6
DL
186** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
187groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
188
8964fec7
SM
189** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
190or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
191several other special buffers.
192
39783d73
WP
193** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
194under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
195.emacs file.
196
197The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
198determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
199
d35fce81
GM
200** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
201abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
202`directory-abbrev-alist'.
203
df5a1902
GM
204** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
205is running in batch mode. For example,
206
207 (message "%s" (read t))
208
209will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
210to standard output.
211
a933dad1
DL
212** Faces and frame parameters.
213
214There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
215Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
216`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
217`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
218sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
219for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
220parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
221
222Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
223`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 224`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
225`default' face and vice versa.
226
f77a4a8a
GM
227** New face `menu'.
228
229The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
230Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
231attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
232
a933dad1
DL
233** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
234
235The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
236colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
237correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
238the screen gamma of a frame's display.
239
240PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
241in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
242color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
243
244The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
245`ScreenGamma'.
246
247** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
248
249The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
250Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
251oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
252of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
253the text.
254
255** Emacs has a new face implementation.
256
257The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
258font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
259height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
260These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
261specify a font.
262
263Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
264These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
265under Lisp changes, below.
266
267** New default font is Courier 12pt.
268
269** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
270its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
271it is hollow.
272
273** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
274truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
275foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
276customizing face `fringe'.
277
278** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
279can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
280
281** LessTif support.
282
283Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
284need a version 0.88.1 or later.
285
286** Toolkit scroll bars.
287
288Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
289LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
290configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
291bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
292bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
293Emacs.
294
295When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
296Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
297Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
298Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
299define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
300`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
301
302Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
303a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
304directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
305different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
306system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
307add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
308
309The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
310`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
311This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
312image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
313Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
314
315** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
316
317When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
318widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
319Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
320
321** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
322
323When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
324whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
325defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
326highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
327displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
328whitespace.
329
330** Busy-cursor.
331
332Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
333display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
334
335** Blinking cursor
336
337M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
338terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
339and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
340the group `cursor'.
341
342** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
343
344This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
345generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
346See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
347details.
348
349Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
350have to do anything to activate it.
351
352** Tabs and variable-width text.
353
354Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
355defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
356independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
357Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
358
359** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
360
361*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
362
363 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
364
79dd1637
RS
365The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
366LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 367
79dd1637
RS
368*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
369LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
370
371** Hscrolling in C code.
372
cc181e95
GM
373Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
374`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
375customized.
a933dad1
DL
376
377** Tool bar support.
378
379Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
380how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
381
382** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
383
384Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
385mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
386line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
387about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
388in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
389
390Currently, the following actions have been defined:
391
392- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
393buffers.
394
395- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
396M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
397
398- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
399
559cee90 400- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
401toggles the read-only status.
402
403- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
404
405** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
406
407When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 408from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
409non-nil.
410
411** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
412
413Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
414Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
415the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
416italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
417Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
40e857ea 418attributes like overlines, strike-through, box are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
419
420** Sound support
421
422Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
423(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
424Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
425(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
426to enable sound support.
427
428** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
429the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
430forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
431value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
432users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
433even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
434
435The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
436
437** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
438
439As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
440drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
441`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
442
443** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
444bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
445
446This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
447`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
448variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
449
450** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
451
452When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
453value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
454number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
455fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
456
457When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
458value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
459number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
460fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
461
462** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
463notably at the end of lines.
464
465All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
466spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
467
eee54b0e
DL
468There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
469
a933dad1
DL
470** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
471query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
472after each match to get the replacement text.
473
f0124b4a 474** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you
4ff40dd0
GM
475edit the replacement string.
476
477** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
478you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
479lisp-complete-symbol.
480
a933dad1
DL
481** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
482
483If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
484longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
485on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
486by setting the following variable:
487
488- User option: max-mini-window-height
489
490Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
491fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
492specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
493
494Default is 0.25.
495
0d43b60d
GM
496** Changes to hideshow.el
497
498Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
499selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
500
501*** Generalized block selection and traversal
502
503A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
504(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
505which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
506`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
507point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
508(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
509
510If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
511i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
512backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
513the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
514
515*** Isearch support for updating mode line
516
517During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
518blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
519line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
520portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
521is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
522
523To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
524something like this in your .emacs.
525
526 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
527 (lambda ()
528 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
529
559cee90
DL
530** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
531
532If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
533entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
534log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
535
536New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
537buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
538
539Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
540if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
541
542The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
543expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
544cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
545a file.
546
3476b54a
GM
547** Changes in Font Lock
548
549*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
550font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
551mode.
552
b3b98592
GM
553** Comint (subshell) changes
554
555Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
556and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
557
558The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
559buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
560buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
561
562The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
563M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
564the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
565
e26cec67
GM
566** Changes to Rmail mode
567
c0510d27
GM
568*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
569set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
570receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
571recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
572`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
573as correspondent.
574
575Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
576mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 577regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 578
3b55acc9
GM
579*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
580to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
581Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
582with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
583for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
584
6a1950ec
GM
585*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
586like `j'.
587
5bb6f079
RS
588*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
589specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 590digest message.
e26cec67 591
993d8b7d
DL
592*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
593in which folder to put messages automatically.
594
400a1ed0
GM
595** Changes to TeX mode
596
597The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
598`latex-mode'.
599
a933dad1
DL
600** Changes to RefTeX mode
601
602*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
603 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
604 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
605 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
606 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
607 can be edited from that buffer.
608
609*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
610 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
611 `A' to use all marked entries).
612
613*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
614 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
615
616*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
617 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
618 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
619 been cited.
620
38de9631
GM
621** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
622The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
623semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
624in column 1 are always made leaves.
625
a933dad1
DL
626** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
627has the following new features:
628
629*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
630may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
631to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
632time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
633
634*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
635feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
636file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
637compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
638pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
639defaults to 1.
640
641** Tooltips.
642
643Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
644mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
645can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
646
647Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
648variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
649the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
650tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
651
652** Customize changes
653
654*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
655`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
656cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
657
658*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
659Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
660default).
661
0ae51efb
GM
662*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
663between custom options. Example:
664
665 (defcustom default-input-method nil
666 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
667 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
668 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
669 :group 'mule
670 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
671 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
672
673This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
674current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
675first in a custom-set-variables statement.
676
a933dad1
DL
677** New features in evaluation commands
678
679The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
680modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
681print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
682customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
683eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
684
a933dad1
DL
685** Dired changes
686
687*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
688command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
689is, delete only empty directories.
690
691*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
692command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
693copy directories recursively.
694
f6737cde
GM
695*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
696in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
697the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
698
a933dad1
DL
699** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
700use the -f option when sending mail.
701
b1c609b1
GM
702** CC mode changes.
703
704Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
705current user setups (although it's believed that these
706incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
707However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
708back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
709compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
710release.
711
712*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
713When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
714variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
715take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
716is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
717settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
718possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
719Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
720
721By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
722special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
723the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
724of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
725above.
726
727Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
728when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
729function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
730call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
731then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
732values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
733only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
734function documentation for more info.
735
736The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
737especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
738with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
739intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
740such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
741is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
742configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
743global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
744
745(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
746
747**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
748This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
749
750This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
751variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
752completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
753the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
754empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
755style system.
756
757**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
758In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
759c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
760as far as possible.
761
762*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
763CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
764surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
765chapter about this in the manual.
766
767**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
768The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
769recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
770primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
771adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
772
773**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
774This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
775c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
776
777**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
778This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
779
780It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
781Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
782A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
783inside CC Mode.
784
785Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
786causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
787the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
788available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
789cc-mode/).
790
791**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
792The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
793specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
794literals.
795
796**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
797It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
798prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
799you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
800this function.
801
802*** Fixes to IDL mode.
803It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
804to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
805struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
806Thanks to Eric Eide.
807
808*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
809It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
810opening braces hangs and when they don't.
811
812**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
813
814*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
815See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
816better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
817and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
818
819*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
820previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
821the column specified by comment-column.
822
823*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
824In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
825is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
826prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
827contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
828don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
829
830*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
831instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
832arguments.
833
834*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
835
836*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
837c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
838c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
839variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
840Provan).
841
842*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
843
c407c570
GM
844** Makefile mode changes
845
846*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
847
848*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
849Fontlock mode is active.
850
87be76f6
GM
851** Isearch changes
852
c407c570
GM
853** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
854respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
855that started the search.
856
87be76f6 857*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
858selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
859
87be76f6
GM
860*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
861
d35fce81 862Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
863`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
864search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
865before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
866highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
867`secondary-selection'.
868
869The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
870will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
871Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
872using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
873usual snappy response.
874
875If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
876matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
877set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
878isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
879
35384f06
GM
880** Changes in sort.el
881
882The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 883as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
884new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
885numeric base.
87be76f6 886
d7b511c4
GM
887** Changes to Ange-ftp
888
889*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
890names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
891sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
892
d7b511c4
GM
893*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
894ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
895
4b9347b3
GM
896** Shell script mode changes.
897
898Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
899derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
900sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
901
79214ddf
FP
902** Etags changes.
903
904*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
905
aca0be23 906*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
907possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
908{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
909This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
910a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 911
79214ddf
FP
912*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
913declarations when given the --declarations option.
914
915*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 916"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
917
918*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
919types.
920
de370c4c 921*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
922
923*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
924
925*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
926are now tagged.
927
928*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
929variables are tagged.
930
931*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
932
8dc78b52
FP
933*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
934for PSWrap.
79214ddf 935
f6737cde
GM
936** Changes in etags.el
937
3f6e4b8b
GM
938*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
939tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
940is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
941
f6737cde
GM
942*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
943the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
944
945If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
946FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
947TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
948obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
949
950TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
951
952FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
953List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
954
955A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
956
957 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
958 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
959 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
960
961*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
962of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
963
964*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
965names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
966
fbc164de
PE
967** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
968and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
969LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
970
0b8a3a6d
DL
971** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
972Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
9738859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
974There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 975
e33b0397
DL
976** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
977remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
978appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
979
980** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
981
6f8ea2ae
DL
982** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
983
c0510d27
GM
984** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
985containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
986expression from that list, are not checked.
987
a933dad1
DL
988** New modes and packages
989
5cb6a58e
SM
990*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
991package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
992be more robust while offering the same functionality.
993
578979ee
GM
994*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
995facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
996separate Texinfo file.
997
dc1178bf
SM
998*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
999or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1000provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1001It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1002used to enter checkin log messages.
1003
6abca616
EZ
1004*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1005without invoking external programs.
1006
1007The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1008and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1009`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1010is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1011Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1012
1013The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1014page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1015
5e5dff44
GM
1016*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1017authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1018
1019The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1020the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1021the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1022Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1023even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1024single step.
1025
1026On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1027matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1028probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1029contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1030
f7136ee8
GM
1031*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1032unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1033actually modifying content of a buffer.
1034
bbd9b566
GM
1035*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1036PostScript.
1037
1038Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1039
1040The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1041
1042 ; comment (until end of line)
1043 A non-terminal
1044 "C" terminal
1045 ?C? special
1046 $A default non-terminal
1047 $"C" default terminal
1048 $?C? default special
1049 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1050 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1051 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1052 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1053 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1054 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1055 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1056 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1057 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1058 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1059 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1060 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1061 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1062 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1063 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1064
1065Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1066
99453a38
GM
1067*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1068align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1069determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1070example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1071equal signs of assignments.
1072
559cee90
DL
1073*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1074paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1075
6448a6b3
GM
1076*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1077list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1078buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1079customize the package.
1080
249652b1
GM
1081*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1082replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1083is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1084and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1085not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1086which answers different needs.
1087
3476b54a
GM
1088*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1089suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1090expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1091course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1092reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1093to be enabled.
1094
8964fec7
SM
1095*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1096containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1097
a933dad1
DL
1098*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1099
1100*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1101
1102*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1103
1104*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1105Pascal) language.
1106
1107*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1108the text at point.
1109
1110*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1111
8d54eb69
DL
1112*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1113
a933dad1
DL
1114*** whitespace.el ???
1115
ebcfda83
GM
1116*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1117files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1118(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1119interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1120often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1121uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1122codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1123
1124*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1125
1126Here is an example of columns:
1127
1128horse apple bus
1129dog pineapple car EXTRA
1130porcupine strawberry airplane
1131
1132Doing the following settings:
1133
1134 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1135 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1136 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1137 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1138
1139
1140Selecting the lines above and typing:
1141
1142 M-x delimit-columns-region
1143
1144It results:
1145
1146[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1147[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1148[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1149
1150delim-col has the following options:
1151
1152 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1153 before all columns.
1154
1155 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1156 between each column.
1157
1158 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1159 after all columns.
1160
1161 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1162 each column.
1163
1164delim-col has the following commands:
1165
1166 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1167 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1168
f507826c
GM
1169*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1170were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1171is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1172
1173The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1174
1175To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1176
1177To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1178M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1179
1180To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1181M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1182
8062f458
DL
1183*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1184text.
1185
36e24b82 1186*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1187of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1188specific to Message mode.
1189
36e24b82
DL
1190*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1191viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1192with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1193
aaa659ef
DL
1194*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1195interface to access directory servers using different directory
1196protocols. It has a separate manual.
1197
eee54b0e
DL
1198*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1199for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1200
612839b6
GM
1201*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1202
1203*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1204minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1205
399da7e3
DL
1206*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1207with the diary features.
1208
6e417ca5
DL
1209*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1210numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1211
a933dad1
DL
1212** Withdrawn packages
1213
1214*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1215functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1216
3261c1d8
DL
1217*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1218
1219*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1220
1221\f
1222* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1223(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1224
c08398de
DL
1225** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1226coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1227DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1228
80c05bd3 1229** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1230of a primitive.
1231
80c05bd3
DL
1232** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1233buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1234This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1235than replacing the local map.
1236
4bc7a543
DL
1237** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1238after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1239
1240** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1241
a933dad1
DL
1242\f
1243* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1244
1245Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1246--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1247When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1248so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1249
0b8a3a6d
DL
1250*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1251`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1252when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1253multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1254
1255*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1256`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1257contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1258
1259*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1260changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1261[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1262regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1263the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1264extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1265bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1266eight-bit-graphic.
1267
1268** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1269
1270A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1271a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1272character set as previously.
1273
1274*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1275They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1276modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1277
1278CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1279characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1280range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1281case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1282
1283FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1284name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1285
1286*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1287registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1288"fontset-default".
1289
1290*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1291argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1292
1293** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1294composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1295buffers and strings.
1296
1297*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1298character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1299code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1300have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1301composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1302composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1303The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1304also been deleted.
1305
1306*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1307specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1308`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1309
1310*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1311MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1312composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1313may differ between buffer and string text.
1314
1315*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1316COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1317
1318*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1319directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1320Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1321`composition' from STRING.
1322
1323*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1324a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1325
1326*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1327obsolete.
1328
1329** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1330Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1331character set is not used.
1332
1333** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1334`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1335X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1336
1337+++
1338** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1339are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
13400xA0..0xFF repectively.
1341
399da7e3 1342+++
f0124b4a
DL
1343** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1344that offset in the file before writing.
1345
3bbc50af
DL
1346** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1347promised long ago.
1348
7464346d
GM
1349** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1350modes.
1351
c94f4677 1352- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1353
c94f4677
GM
1354Register a new minor mode.
1355
1356TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1357is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1358
1359NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1360is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1361symbol whose value is such a string.
1362
1363Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1364to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1365
1366Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1367in `minor-mode-alist'.
1368
1369Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1370It is currently not used.
7464346d 1371
612839b6
GM
1372** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1373`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1374from which the command was issued.
1375
1376** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1377`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1378`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1379additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1380operate on.
1381
271b4185
GM
1382** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1383to `window-buffer-height'.
1384
1385- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1386
1387Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1388The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1389lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1390
1391Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1392respectively.
1393
1394If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1395COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1396
1397The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1398obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1399on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1400
1401Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1402buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1403possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1404is currently displayed in some window.
1405
3c30cb6e
DL
1406** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1407argument function's results.
1408
62f20204
GM
1409** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1410signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1411
c0510d27
GM
1412** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1413header is the list of headers passed to it.
1414
1415** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1416ignores differences in case and text representation.
1417
1418** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1419cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1420as follows:
1421
1422 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1423 nil don't display a cursor
1424 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1425 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1426 others display a box cursor.
1427
9a0dd3dc
GM
1428** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1429an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1430defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1431set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1432
d7b511c4 1433** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1434specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1435the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1436text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1437
1438Example:
1439
1440 (string-to-syntax "()")
1441 => (4 . 41)
1442
1fa28578
GM
1443** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1444other than 10.
1445
1446*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1447INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1448
1449 #b1111
1450 => 15
1451 #b-1111
1452 => -15
1453
1454*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1455
1456 #o666
1457 => 438
1458
1459*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1460
1461 #xbeef
1462 => 48815
1463
1464*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1465
1466 #2R-111
1467 => -7
1468 #25rah
1469 => 267
1470
3d4ff2dd 1471** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1472the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1473and isn't a string.
1474
3d4ff2dd
GM
1475** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1476a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1477value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1478not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1479
16ce590d
DL
1480+++
1481** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1482
73825616 1483** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1484for a regexp in a string.
1485
1486** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1487`mouse-position-function'.
1488
723e779c
GM
1489** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1490that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1491
d1e103b2
GM
1492** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1493Keywords are now always considered constants.
1494
31047e0d
DL
1495+++
1496** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1497returns it.
1498
7a85e4df
GM
1499** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1500returned by function `recent-keys'.
1501
02b14400
RS
1502+++
1503** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1504can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1505Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1506etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1507mode.
404fa7d6 1508
02b14400 1509+++
8964fec7
SM
1510** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1511and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1512
02b14400
RS
1513+++
1514** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1515has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1516function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1517returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1518been performed."
1519
1520When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1521and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1522hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1523then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1524
02b14400 1525+++
81da8b32
GM
1526** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1527In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1528and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1529
02b14400 1530+++
9e207b90
GM
1531** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1532with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1533specified table.
1534
1535 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1536
1537Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1538TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1539saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1540what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1541
02b14400 1542+++
d7f89643 1543** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1544Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1545
02b14400 1546+++
dde9e75a
GM
1547** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1548removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1549
02b14400 1550+++
9da30515
GM
1551** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1552instead of being optional.
1553
02b14400 1554+++
d20679eb
GM
1555** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1556modify read-only text.
1557
02b14400 1558+++
fbc164de
PE
1559** New functions and variables for locales.
1560
1561The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1562decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1563time functions like strftime. The new variables
1564`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1565locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1566
1567The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1568environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1569the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1570environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1571not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1572`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1573`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1574
02b14400 1575+++
863476d1
SM
1576** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1577To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1578modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1579start sequences.
1580
02b14400 1581+++
ef6d912c
GM
1582** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1583because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1584
02b14400 1585+++
a933dad1
DL
1586** New function `propertize'
1587
1588The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1589strings with text properties.
1590
1591- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1592
1593Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1594by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1595PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1596specified value of that property. Example:
1597
1598 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1599
1600+++
1601** push and pop macros.
1602
02b14400
RS
1603Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1604are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1605as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1606
1607(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1608(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1609 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1610
02b14400
RS
1611** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1612
6c7fd5aa
RS
1613Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1614are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1615
1616(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1617 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1618 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1619 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1620
1621(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1622 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1623 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1624 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1625
a933dad1
DL
1626+++
1627** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1628as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1629
1630[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1631[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1632[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1633[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1634[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1635 space, and DEL.
1636[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1637 and DEL.
1638[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1639 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1640 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1641[:alpha:] matches letters.
1642 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1643 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1644[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1645[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1646[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1647[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1648 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1649 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1650[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1651[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1652[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1653
1654+++
1655** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1656
1657The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1658
1659- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1660
1661The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1662are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1663
1664:test TEST
1665
1666TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1667Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1668it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1669
1670:size SIZE
1671
1672SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1673many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1674
1675:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1676
1677REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1678full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1679size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
16801.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1681old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1682
1683:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1684
1685THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1686hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1687(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1688
1689:weakness WEAK
1690
1691WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1692Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1693their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1694hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1695
1696- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1697
1698Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1699
1700- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1701
1702Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1703
1704- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1705
1706Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1707values are shared.
1708
1709- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1710
1711Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1712
1713- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1714
1715Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1716
1717- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1718
1719Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1720
1721- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1722
1723Returns the size of TABLE.
1724
1725- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1726
1727Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1728
1729- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1730
1731Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1732
1733- Function: clrhash TABLE
1734
1735Clear TABLE.
1736
1737- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1738
1739Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1740not found.
1741
79214ddf 1742- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1743
1744Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1745another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1746
1747- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1748
1749Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1750
1751- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1752
1753Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1754arguments KEY and VALUE.
1755
1756- Function: sxhash OBJ
1757
1758Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1759
1760- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1761
1762Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1763a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1764comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1765and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1766of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1767
1768TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1769
1770HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1771code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1772integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1773
1774Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1775be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1776
1777 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1778 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1779
1780 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1781 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1782
79214ddf 1783 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1784 'case-fold-string-hash))
1785
1786 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1787
1788+++
1789** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1790
1791It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1792circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1793a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1794
1795+++
1796** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1797
1798If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1799#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1800
a933dad1
DL
1801+++
1802** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1803t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1804specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1805is too short to reach that column.
1806
1807+++
1808** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1809now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1810after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1811two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1812
1813If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1814perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1815and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1816
1817+++
1818** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1819to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1820
1821+++
1822** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1823calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1824
1825+++
1826** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1827directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1828small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1829small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1830temporary-file-directory instead.
1831
1832+++
1833** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1834the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1835`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1836hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1837
1838+++
1839** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1840elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1841
1842+++
1843** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1844
1845make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1846creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1847ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1848
1849+++
1850** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1851
1852The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1853on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1854is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1855never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1856ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1857overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1858
1859If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1860that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1861to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1862The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1863
1864+++
1865** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1866
1867Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1868If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1869ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1870result string.
1871
1872Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1873string where arguments appear in the result string.
1874
1875Example:
1876
1877 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1878 (s2 "world"))
1879 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1880 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1881 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1882
1883results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1884
1885+++
1886** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1887
1888Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1889The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1890argument in it.
1891
1892 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1893 (arg "world"))
1894 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1895 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1896 (message msg arg))
1897
1898+++
1899** Sound support
1900
1901Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1902(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1903
1904Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1905(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1906to enable sound support.
1907
1908Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1909list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1910when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1911functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1912sound to play, before playing the sound.
1913
1914The following sound properties are supported:
1915
1916- `:file FILE'
1917
1918FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1919searched relative to `data-directory'.
1920
6fb40beb
GM
1921- `:data DATA'
1922
1923DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1924may be present, but not both.
1925
a933dad1
DL
1926- `:volume VOLUME'
1927
1928VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
19290..1. This property is optional.
1930
1931Other properties are ignored.
1932
1933** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1934
1935** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1936a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1937
1938** Changes to garbage collection
1939
1940*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1941of live and free strings.
1942
1943*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1944strings that have been consed so far.
1945
a933dad1 1946\f
04545643
GM
1947* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
1948Lisp Manual
1949
0b8a3a6d
DL
1950** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
1951satisfying one of a list of specifications.
1952
1953+++
1954** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
1955optional.
1956
04545643
GM
1957** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
1958
1959When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
1960around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
1961at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
1962properties and overlays that apply to the image.
1963
1964\f
a933dad1
DL
1965* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1966
1967Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1968--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1969When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1970so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1971
f6d3257b
GM
1972** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1973to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1974
1975Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1976text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1977is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1978your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1979laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1980just display it black instead.
1981
1982This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1983a line like
1984
1985 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1986
1987in your `.emacs'.
1988
a933dad1
DL
1989** New face implementation.
1990
1991Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1992font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1993
1994+++
1995*** New faces.
1996
1997Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1998
1999 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2000
a933dad1
DL
2001 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2002 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2003
a933dad1 2004 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2005
a933dad1 2006 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2007
a933dad1 2008 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2009
a933dad1 2010 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2011
a933dad1
DL
2012 7. Background color.
2013
2014 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2015
2016 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2017
2018 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2019
2020 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2021
2022 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2023 color.
2024
2025 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2026 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2027
2028Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2029same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2030frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2031faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2032with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2033attributes mentioned above.
2034
2035There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2036definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2037created frames.
79214ddf 2038
a933dad1
DL
2039A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2040have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2041`fully-specified'.
2042
2043+++
2044*** Face merging.
2045
2046The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2047combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2048aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2049properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2050that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2051results in a fully-specified face.
2052
2053+++
2054*** Face realization.
2055
2056After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2057merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2058realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2059available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2060face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2061cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2062
2063Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2064character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2065for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2066charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2067
2068Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2069specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2070being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2071the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2072statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2073
2074In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2075`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
20760x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2077the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2078initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2079Emacs.
2080
2081Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2082`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2083registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2084with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2085
2086++++
2087**** Clearing face caches.
2088
2089The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2090on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2091unused fonts.
2092
2093+++
2094*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2095
a933dad1
DL
2096Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2097given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2098for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2099
2100If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2101pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2102family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2103property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2104an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2105
2106Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2107against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2108match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2109
2110Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2111
2112The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2113attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2114face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2115names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2116that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2117width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2118to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2119
2120Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2121specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2122face doesn't exist.
2123
2124+++
2125**** Scalable fonts
2126
2127Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2128since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2129servers.
2130
2131To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2132`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2133scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2134Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2135scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2136that list. Example:
2137
2138 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2139
2140allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2141
2142+++
2143*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2144
2145- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2146
2147Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2148is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2149string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2150
2151If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2152the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2153FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2154POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2155SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2156These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2157if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2158REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2159the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2160of the face font sort order.
2161
79214ddf 2162- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2163
2164Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2165omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2166(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2167non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2168
2169- Variable: font-list-limit
2170
2171Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2172won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2173matching font. The default is currently 100.
2174
2175+++
2176*** Setting face attributes.
2177
2178For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2179with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2180implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2181`face-attribute'.
2182
2183Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2184symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2185
2186The following attributes are recognized:
2187
2188`:family'
2189
2190VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2191or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2192and `?' are allowed.
2193
2194`:width'
2195
2196VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2197It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2198`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2199`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2200
2201`:height'
2202
2203VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
22041/10 pt.
2205
2206`:weight'
2207
2208VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2209symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2210`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2211
2212`:slant'
2213
2214VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2215symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2216`reverse-oblique'.
2217
2218`:foreground', `:background'
2219
2220VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2221
2222`:underline'
2223
2224VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2225VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2226a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2227don't underline.
2228
2229`:overline'
2230
2231VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2232VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2233string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2234overline.
2235
2236`:strike-through'
2237
2238VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2239striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2240face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2241is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2242
2243`:box'
2244
2245VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2246around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2247VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2248of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2249and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2250VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2251:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2252the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2253specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2254defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2255the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2256color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2257should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2258like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2259that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2260the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2261box.
2262
2263`:inverse-video'
2264
2265VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2266inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2267
2268`:stipple'
2269
2270If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2271The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2272searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2273HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2274is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2275explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2276
2277For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2278and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2279
2280`:font'
2281
2282Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2283XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2284is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2285versions of Emacs.
2286
2287For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2288be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2289must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2290
2291Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2292`defface'.
2293
2294*** Face attributes and X resources
2295
2296The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2297from X resources:
2298
2299 Face attribute X resource class
2300-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2301 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2302 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2303 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2304 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2305 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2306 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2307 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2308 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2309 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2310 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2311 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2312 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2313 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2314 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2315 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2316 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2317 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2318 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2319 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2320
2321+++
2322*** Text property `face'.
2323
2324The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2325specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2326specification can be
2327
23281. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2329
23302. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2331 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2332 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2333 for face attribute names.
2334
23353. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2336 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2337 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2338
2339+++
2340** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2341
acf3ecb7
EZ
2342The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2343on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2344the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2345default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2346`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2347used to clear the mapping table.
2348
acf3ecb7
EZ
2349** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2350
2351The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2352and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2353type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2354color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2355display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2356old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2357`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2358compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2359should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2360modify their color-related behavior.
2361
2362The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2363any frame type.
2364
8a5719f0
EZ
2365** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2366
2367The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2368`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2369`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2370`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2371`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2372`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2373display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2374the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2375platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2376
a933dad1
DL
2377+++
2378** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2379
463cac2d 2380This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2381
2382The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2383end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2384Otherwise, it returns zero.
2385
463cac2d
GM
2386** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2387
2388There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2389buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2390text-property.
2391
9a9dfda8 2392Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2393forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2394to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2395not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2396commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2397boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2398`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2399functions.
463cac2d
GM
2400
2401Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2402a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2403editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2404
9a9dfda8
GM
2405The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2406
2407- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2408
2409Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2410A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2411If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2412constrained position if that is is different.
2413
2414If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2415positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2416ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2417constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2418as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2419is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2420fields.
2421
2422If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2423NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2424unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2425C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2426only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2427
2428- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2429
2430Erases the field surrounding POS.
2431A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2432If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2433
2434- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2435
2436Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2437A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2438If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2439If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2440field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2441
2442- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2443
2444Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2445A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2446If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2447If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2448then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2449
2450- Function: field-string &optional POS
2451
2452Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2453A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2454If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2455
2456- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2457
2458Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2459A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2460If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2461
a933dad1
DL
2462+++
2463** Image support.
2464
2465Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2466strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2467(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2468replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2469
2470If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2471`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2472AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2473window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2474area.
2475
2476IMAGE is an image specification.
2477
2478*** Image specifications
2479
2480Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2481is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2482specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2483symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2484described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2485
2486The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2487
2488`:ascent ASCENT'
2489
576da55d
GM
2490ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2491If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2492to use for its ascent.
2493
2494If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2495image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2496
04545643
GM
2497If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2498centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2499of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2500overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2501
2502`:margin MARGIN'
2503
79214ddf 2504MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2505margin around the image. Default is 0.
2506
2507`:relief RELIEF'
2508
2509RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2510around an image.
2511
2512`:algorithm ALGO'
2513
2514Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2515be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2516supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2517which is intended to display images "disabled."
2518
2519`:heuristic-mask BG'
2520
2521If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2522background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2523determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2524corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2525the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2526be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2527background of the image.
2528
2529`:file FILE'
2530
2531Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2532search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2533building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2534may be present in the image specification.
2535
518df5c4
GM
2536`:data DATA'
2537
2538Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2539supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2540present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2541support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2542
a933dad1
DL
2543*** Supported image types
2544
b246b1f6 2545**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2546
2547XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2548properties supported are
2549
2550`:foreground FG'
2551
2552FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2553is the frame's foreground.
2554
2555`:background FG'
2556
2557BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2558the frame's background color.
2559
2560XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2561case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2562instead of a `:file' property.
2563
2564`:width WIDTH'
2565
2566WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2567
2568`:height HEIGHT'
2569
2570HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2571
2572`:data DATA'
2573
2574DATA must be either
2575
2576 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2577 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2578
2579 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2580
2581 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2582 bitmap.
2583
c76e04a8
GM
2584 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2585 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2586 in the file.
2587
a933dad1
DL
2588**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2589
2590XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2591`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2592found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2593`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2594
2595Additional image properties supported are:
2596
2597`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2598
2599SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2600name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2601name.
2602
2603XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2604add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2605
a933dad1
DL
2606The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2607to display compressed images.
2608
2609**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2610
2611PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2612mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2613defined.
2614
2615**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2616
2617Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2618package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2619are:
2620
a933dad1
DL
2621**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2622
2623Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2624package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2625properties defined.
2626
2627**** GIF, image type `gif'
2628
2629Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2630`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2631
2632Additional image properties supported are:
2633
2634`:index INDEX'
2635
2636INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2637multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2638
2639This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2640For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2641at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2642every 0.1 seconds.
2643
2644(defun show-anim (file max)
2645 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2646 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2647
2648(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2649 (when (= idx max)
2650 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2651 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2652 (save-excursion
2653 (set-buffer buffer)
2654 (goto-char (point-min))
2655 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2656 (insert-image img "x"))
2657 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2658
2659**** PNG, image type `png'
2660
2661Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2662package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2663properties defined.
2664
2665**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2666
2667Additional image properties supported are:
2668
2669`:pt-width WIDTH'
2670
2671WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2672integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2673
2674`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2675
2676HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2677must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2678
2679`:bounding-box BOX'
2680
2681BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2682the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2683files. This is an required property.
2684
2685Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2686lisp/gs.el.
2687
2688*** Lisp interface.
2689
79214ddf
FP
2690The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2691which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2692
2693Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2694they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2695The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2696manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2697images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2698
2699*** Simplified image API, image.el
2700
2701The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2702creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2703can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2704define an image based on available image types. The functions
2705`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2706buffer.
2707
2708+++
2709** Display margins.
2710
2711Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2712and images.
2713
2714To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2715`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2716`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2717obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2718`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2719the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2720of the display margins.
2721
2722You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2723containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2724one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2725string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2726in this file).
2727
2728+++
2729** Help display
2730
2731Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2732moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2733`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2734that have a `help-echo' property.
2735
2736The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2737items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2738If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2739evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2740tool-bar item is used.
2741
2742The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2743help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2744help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2745
2746+++
2747** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2748
2749The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2750This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2751
2752The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2753scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2754The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2755scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2756used.
2757
79214ddf
FP
2758 (global-set-key [A-down]
2759 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2760 (interactive)
79214ddf 2761 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2762 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2763 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2764 #'(lambda ()
2765 (interactive)
79214ddf 2766 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2767 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2768
2769+++
2770** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2771
2772Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2773when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2774variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2775is called with one argument, POS.
2776
2777At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2778characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2779as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2780property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2781`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2782
2783+++
2784** Tool bar support.
2785
2786Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2787parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2788controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2789suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2790`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2791automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2792
2793*** Tool bar item definitions
2794
2795Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2796`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2797where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2798
a933dad1
DL
2799CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2800evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2801the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2802property (see below).
79214ddf 2803
a933dad1
DL
2804BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2805binding are currently ignored.
2806
2807The following properties are recognized:
2808
2809`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2810
a933dad1
DL
2811FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2812or disabled.
79214ddf 2813
a933dad1 2814`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2815
a933dad1 2816FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2817
a933dad1
DL
2818`:filter FUNCTION'
2819
2820FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2821FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2822used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2823
a933dad1
DL
2824`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2825
2826TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2827and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2828
a933dad1
DL
2829`:image IMAGES'
2830
2831IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2832image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2833meaning of each of the four elements:
2834
2835 Index Use when item is
2836 ----------------------------------------
2837 0 enabled and selected
2838 1 enabled and deselected
2839 2 disabled and selected
2840 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2841
4ba7246d
GM
2842If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2843algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2844
a933dad1 2845`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2846
a933dad1
DL
2847Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2848is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2849
2850*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2851
2852If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2853resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2854than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2855
79214ddf 2856If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2857raised when the mouse moves over them.
2858
2859You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2860`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2861pixels. Default is 1.
2862
2863You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2864`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2865
2866*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2867
2868You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2869a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2870
2871 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2872 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2873 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2874
2875is the original tool bar item definition, then
2876
2877 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2878
2879makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2880item.
2881
2882** Mode line changes.
2883
2884+++
2885*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2886
2887The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2888that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2889a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2890
28911. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2892a `local-map' text property.
2893
28942. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2895that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2896
28973. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2898is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2899`local-map' property.
2900
2901The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2902properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2903example.
2904
54522c9f
GM
2905*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2906evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2907
a933dad1
DL
2908+++
2909*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2910variable mode-line-format to nil.
2911
2912+++
2913*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2914
2915This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2916`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2917completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2918`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2919line.
2920
2921The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2922`header-line'.
2923
2924The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2925position in the header-line.
2926
2927+++
2928** Text property `display'
2929
2930The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2931also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2932`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2933below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2934
2935*** Variable width and height spaces
2936
2937To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2938specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2939`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2940area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2941marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2942displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2943simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2944
2945The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2946PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2947properties described below.
2948
2949The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2950characters having the `display' property.
2951
2952- :width WIDTH
2953
2954Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2955character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2956
2957- :relative-width FACTOR
2958
2959Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2960first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2961same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2962width of that character by FACTOR.
2963
2964- :align-to HPOS
2965
2966Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2967value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2968
2969Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2970
2971- :height HEIGHT
2972
2973Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2974normal line height.
2975
2976- :relative-height FACTOR
2977
2978The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2979of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2980
2981- :ascent ASCENT
2982
2983Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2984used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2985baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2986equal to 100.
2987
2988You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2989
2990*** Images
2991
2992A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2993. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2994in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2995their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2996the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2997`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2998area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2999the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3000as display specification.
3001
3002*** Other display properties
3003
3004- :space-width FACTOR
3005
3006Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3007should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3008integer or float.
3009
3010- :height HEIGHT
3011
3012Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3013
3014If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3015means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3016the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3017``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3018a font is available counts as a step.
3019
3020If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3021as tall as the frame's default font.
3022
3023If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3024height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3025
3026Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3027`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3028
3029- :raise FACTOR
3030
3031FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3032font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3033raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3034amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3035`:height' subproperty.
3036
3037*** Conditional display properties
3038
3039All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3040has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3041applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3042During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3043the text having the `display' property.
3044
3045The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3046`(:when t SPEC)'.
3047
3048+++
3049** New menu separator types.
3050
3051Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3052item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3053treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3054to specify other menu separator types.
3055
3056- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3057
3058No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3059separator occurs.
3060
3061- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3062
3063A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3064
3065- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3066
3067A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3068
3069- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3070
3071A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3072
3073- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3074
3075A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3076
3077- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3078
3079A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3080displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3081
3082- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3083
3084A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3085
3086- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3087
3088A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3089
3090- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3091
3092A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3093
3094- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3095
3096Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3097
3098- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3099
3100Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3101
3102- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3103
3104Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3105
3106- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3107
3108Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3109
3110Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3111the corresponding single-line separators.
3112
3113+++
3114** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3115
3116The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3117`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3118Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3119that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3120default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3121default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3122default foreground is black.
3123
3124The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3125(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3126`ScrollBarBackground').
3127
3128Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3129settings for scroll bar colors.
3130
3131+++
3132** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3133display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3134
3135---
3136** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3137starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3138on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3139line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3140the original window start.
3141
3142---
3143** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3144`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3145now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3146
3147+++
3148** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3149
3150A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3151`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3152windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3153other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3154
3155The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3156fixed-width and fixed-height.
3157
3158 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3159
3160A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3161fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3162window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3163change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3164temporarily to nil, for example
3165
3166 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3167 (enlarge-window 10))
3168
79214ddf 3169Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3170or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3171
3172** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3173terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3174to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3175overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3176horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3177support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
3178^L
3179* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3180
3181** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3182M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3183\f
3184* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3185
3186** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3187
3188You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3189Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3190`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3191
3192If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3193is the one that is used.
3194
3195** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3196the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3197Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3198separate from the command's regular output.
3199Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3200says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3201In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3202the buffer name.
3203
3204When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3205output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3206it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3207cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3208
3209** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3210the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3211is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3212created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3213
3214** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3215example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3216match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3217quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3218
3219** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3220now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3221if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3222they never ignore case.
3223
3224** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3225under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3226applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3227of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3228just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3229convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3230part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3231
3232If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3233the same format that was used in the file before.
3234
3235You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3236`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3237
3238** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3239renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3240This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3241
3242** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3243The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3244buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3245your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3246is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3247end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3248Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3249
3250The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3251eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3252control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3253format. You can now customize these variables.
3254
3255** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3256filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3257filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3258enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3259
3260** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3261in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3262windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3263
3264** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3265dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3266doesn't have any effect.
3267
3268** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3269not one per buffer.
3270
3271** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3272use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3273 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3274
3275** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3276To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3277`auto-show-mode' command.
3278
3279** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3280avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3281versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3282choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3283occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3284
3285** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3286cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3287
3288** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3289character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3290feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3291
3292** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3293the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3294interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3295and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3296
3297** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3298
3299The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3300that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3301one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3302codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3303set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3304
3305Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3306from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3307
3308IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3309equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3310a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3311`?' on other systems.
3312
3313IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3314feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3315Unix.
3316
3317Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3318current codepage when it starts.
3319
3320** Mail changes
3321
feab4fba
GM
3322*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3323`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3324appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3325non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3326MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3327headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3328latin-1:
3329
3330 MIME-version: 1.0
3331 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3332 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3333
a933dad1
DL
3334*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3335default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3336default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3337sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3338buffer-file-coding-system.
3339
3340You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3341sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3342mail.
3343
3344*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3345if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3346Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3347list of possible coding systems.
3348
3349** CC Mode changes
3350
3351*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3352modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3353longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3354docstring for details.
3355
3356*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3357symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3358found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3359prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3360lineup functions use this feature currently.
3361
3362*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3363"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3364
3365*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3366"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3367
3368*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3369from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3370symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3371c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3372anonymous classes.
3373
3374*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3375syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3376
3377*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3378inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3379support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3380function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3381
3382*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3383(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3384brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3385c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3386(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3387
3388*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3389
3390*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3391
3392*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3393for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3394
3395*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3396
3397*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3398associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3399This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3400circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3401class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3402
3403** Gnus changes.
3404
3405*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3406added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3407Gnus manual for the full story.
3408
3409*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3410before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3411group, which is created automatically.
3412
3413*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3414values.
3415
3416*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3417
3418*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3419outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3420
3421*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3422`C-u C-c C-c'.
3423
3424*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3425
3426*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3427re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3428
3429*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3430
3431*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3432Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3433
3434*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3435`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3436
3437*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3438control over simplification.
3439
3440*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3441
3442*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3443limit.
3444
3445*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3446
3447*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3448
79214ddf 3449*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3450If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3451rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3452
3453*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3454`a' forces normal posting method.
3455
3456*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3457-- `W d'.
3458
3459*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3460to a non-nil value.
3461
3462*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3463where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3464
3465*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3466has been added.
3467
3468*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3469
3470*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3471
3472*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3473`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3474
3475*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3476`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3477
3478*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3479
3480*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3481been added.
3482
3483*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3484`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3485
3486*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3487updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3488
3489*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3490
3491*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3492
3493*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3494
3495** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3496
3497*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3498options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3499nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3500
3501*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3502TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3503of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3504TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3505can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3506
3507*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3508All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3509but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3510the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3511
3512*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3513the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3514buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3515mismatch.
3516
3517** Changes to RefTeX mode
3518
3519*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3520file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3521
3522*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3523lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3524characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3525removed from the label.
3526
3527*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3528a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3529
3530*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3531customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3532
3533*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3534`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3535expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3536
3537*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3538
3539** New/deleted modes and packages
3540
3541*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3542SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3543
3544*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3545editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3546SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3547
3548*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3549changes with a special face.
3550
3551*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3552this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3553Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3554\f
3555* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3556
3557** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3558This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3559conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3560and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3561check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3562
3563The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3564Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3565distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3566
3567** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3568MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3569controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3570directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3571Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3572on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3573string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3574program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3575printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3576
3577** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3578output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3579available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3580input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3581temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3582program.
3583
3584An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3585and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3586programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3587automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3588as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3589ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3590
3591** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3592a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3593MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3594was not documented clearly before.
3595
3596** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3597This includes Tetris and Snake.
3598\f
3599* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3600
3601** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3602return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3603They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3604meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3605
3606** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3607WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3608and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3609
3610** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3611
3612*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3613It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3614
3615*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3616the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3617integers.
3618
3619** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3620files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3621arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3622file names and attributes are returned.
3623
3624** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3625sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3626accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3627It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3628returns the result.
3629
3630** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3631to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3632
3633** New functions for base64 conversion:
3634
3635The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3636into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3637performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3638optionally.
3639
3640Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3641job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3642
3643**
3644The new function process-running-child-p
3645will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3646terminal to its own child process.
3647
3648** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3649when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3650to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3651itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3652
3653** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3654be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3655
3656** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3657:included is an alias for :visible.
3658
3659easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3660easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3661to move or copy menu entries.
3662
3663** Multibyte editing changes
3664
3665*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3666an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3667make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3668work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3669char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3670 (setq char (sref str idx)
3671 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3672The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3673
3674If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3675(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3676 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3677
3678*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3679region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3680deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3681
3682 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3683
3684This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3685across the boundary.
3686
3687*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3688`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3689 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3690 contains 8-bit characters.
3691 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3692 contains invalid characters.
3693
3694*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3695text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3696preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3697text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3698way.
3699
3700*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3701If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3702end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3703prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3704
3705*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3706compose Thai characters in a string.
3707
3708** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3709argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3710for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3711menus should always use the third argument.
3712
3713** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3714read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3715arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3716input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3717
3718** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3719of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3720programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3721inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3722
3723** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3724the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3725returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3726echo area contents.
3727
3728 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3729
3730** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3731NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3732requested feature cannot be loaded.
3733
3734** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3735foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3736means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3737
3738** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3739gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3740
3741** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3742read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3743unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3744end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3745
3746** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3747the gap of the current buffer.
3748
3749** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3750to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3751current buffer.
3752
3753** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3754facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3755These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3756it back in after any modifications have been made.
3757\f
3758* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3759
3760** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3761the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3762/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3763directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3764subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3765
3766Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3767names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3768Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3769which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3770these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3771
3772Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3773starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3774time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3775
3776This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3777Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3778to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3779subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3780`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3781results.
3782
3783** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3784GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3785that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3786fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3787\f
3788* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3789
3790** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3791including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3792it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3793perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3794
3795** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3796specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3797region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3798further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3799command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3800within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3801are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3802region.
3803
3804In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3805selective undo.
3806
3807** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3808unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3809buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3810effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3811Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3812
3813The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3814though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3815-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3816load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3817
3818** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3819no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3820enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3821something that most users not do.
3822
3823** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3824operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3825The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3826applications.
3827
3828C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3829pasting operations.
3830
3831** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3832setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3833like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3834printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3835`ps-printer-name'.
3836
3837** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3838minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3839any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3840except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3841incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3842hits a new word.
3843
3844Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3845Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3846to be confused by TeX commands.
3847
3848You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3849correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3850clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3851of various alternative replacements and actions.
3852
3853Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3854the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3855corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3856alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3857flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3858
3859Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3860flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3861
3862** Changes in input method usage.
3863
3864Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3865the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3866respectively.
3867
3868You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3869
3870If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3871of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3872
3873The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3874that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3875
3876 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3877
3878 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3879
3880 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3881 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3882
3883 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3884 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3885 o When you are using a complex input method.
3886 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3887
3888If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3889input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3890and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3891setting it to t is helpful.
3892
3893The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3894
3895In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3896keys:
3897 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3898 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3899 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3900These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3901environment.
3902
3903** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3904names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3905minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3906get
3907
3908 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3909
3910which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3911
3912Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3913Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3914
3915** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3916at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3917its owner and group.
3918
3919** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3920Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3921
3922** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3923contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3924
3925** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3926which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3927in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3928by the left edge of the rectangle.
3929
3930** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3931increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3932C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3933for writing keyboard macros.
3934
3935** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3936files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3937frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3938the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3939additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3940info.
3941
3942** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3943
3944** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3945query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3946contents only.
3947
3948** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3949confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3950the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3951says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3952
3953** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3954non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3955literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3956
3957** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3958now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3959Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3960inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3961
3962** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3963failure if the command produces no output.
3964
3965** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3966manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3967the mouse.
3968
3969** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3970mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3971function and variable names.
3972
3973** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3974reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3975file-coding-system-alist.
3976
3977** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3978t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3979converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3980the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3981according to the current fontset.
3982
3983** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3984
3985The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3986that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3987nonascii-insert-offset.
3988
3989For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3990enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3991nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3992characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3993
3994** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3995an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3996
3997** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3998letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3999
4000** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4001are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4002command keys.
4003
4004** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4005user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4006
4007Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4008user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4009all variables that have documentation.
4010
4011** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4012shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4013that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4014minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4015it should show; the default is 20.
4016
4017Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4018the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4019of your input.
4020
4021** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4022all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4023recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4024argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4025the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4026Newly added options are included as well.
4027
4028If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4029then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4030for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4031
4032This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4033Customize menu.
4034
4035** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4036the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4037
4038** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4039buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4040invoked.
4041
4042** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4043that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4044The default is 1.
4045
4046** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4047syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4048new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4049(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4050sensibly.
4051
4052** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4053
4054** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4055value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4056two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4057
4058** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4059reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4060for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4061every night.
4062
7464346d
GM
4063** Desktop changes
4064
4065*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4066the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4067
7464346d
GM
4068*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4069and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4070
a933dad1
DL
4071** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4072read and post multi-lingual articles.
4073
4074** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4075doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4076be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4077outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4078the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4079made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4080
4081** Mail reading and sending changes
4082
4083*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4084the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4085changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4086toggle.
4087
4088*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4089now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4090summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4091the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4092rmail-default-body-file.
4093
4094*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4095longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4096handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4097
4098*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4099it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4100is evaluated to insert the signature.
4101
4102*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4103outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4104handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4105putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4106transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4107especially interested in trying feedmail.
4108
4109feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4110feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4111provided by feedmail are:
4112
4113**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4114stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4115there is also a queue for draft messages
4116
4117**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4118be prompted for confirmation
4119
4120**** does smart filling of address headers
4121
4122**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4123the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4124can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4125
4126**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4127the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4128/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4129function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4130
4131** Dired changes
4132
4133*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4134files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4135
4136*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4137run Dired on the directory name at point.
4138
4139*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4140files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4141for a specified regexp.
4142
4143** VC Changes
4144
4145*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4146conveniently.
4147
4148*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4149faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4150Dired.
4151
4152VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4153directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4154listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4155currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4156
4157You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4158then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4159vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4160control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4161on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4162
4163All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4164is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4165`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4166the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4167`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4168
4169The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4170toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4171VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4172`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4173
4174Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4175ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4176command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4177
4178*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4179file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4180session to resolve them.
4181
4182Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4183resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4184contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4185uses as well).
4186
4187*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4188command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4189you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4190either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4191branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4192If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4193using ediff.
4194
4195** Changes in Font Lock
4196
4197*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4198are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4199use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4200unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4201compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4202
4203** Frame name display changes
4204
4205*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4206frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4207raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4208when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4209
4210*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4211frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4212menu.
4213
4214** Comint (subshell) changes
4215
4216*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4217subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4218with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4219
4220*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4221
4222C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4223that is, the line after the last line you got.
4224You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4225
4226C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4227send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4228the following line.
4229
4230C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4231which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4232previously sent input.
4233
4234C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4235it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4236as the search string.
4237
4238*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4239automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4240
4241** C mode changes
4242
4243*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4244and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4245assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4246definition.
a933dad1
DL
4247
4248*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4249(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4250Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4251style is still the default however.
4252
4253*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4254
4255*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4256are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4257them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4258
4259*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4260and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4261
4262*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4263namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4264
4265*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4266makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4267
4268*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4269c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4270
4271*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4272should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4273package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4274variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4275
4276** Changes to hippie-expand.
4277
79214ddf 4278*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4279non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4280which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4281
4282*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4283non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4284expanding dynamically.
4285
4286*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4287non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4288
4289*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4290non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4291this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4292expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4293
4294*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4295
4296** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4297
4298*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4299bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4300automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4301bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4302against the first word in the title.
4303
4304*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4305capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4306bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4307lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4308lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4309bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4310
4311*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4312generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4313replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4314bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4315
4316** Changes in vcursor.el.
4317
4318*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4319and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4320variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4321entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4322`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4323in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4324
4325*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4326Editing group once the package is loaded.
4327
4328*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4329generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4330vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4331
4332*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4333vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4334
4335** Ispell changes.
4336
79214ddf
FP
4337*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4338buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4339are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4340
4341*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4342A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4343and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4344defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4345include:
a933dad1
DL
4346
4347 o URLs are automatically skipped
4348 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4349
4350*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4351
4352** Changes to RefTeX mode
4353
4354RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4355large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4356re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4357section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4358
4359*** New recursive parser.
4360
4361The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4362entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4363recursive parser scans the individual files.
4364
4365*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4366
a933dad1
DL
4367Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4368partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4369the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4370
4371 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4372
4373*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4374
4375This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4376
4377 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4378
4379*** Using multiple selection buffers
4380
4381If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4382for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4383
4384 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4385
4386*** References to external documents.
4387
4388The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4389documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4390documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4391macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4392RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4393the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4394The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4395
4396*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4397
4398The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4399and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4400
4401Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4402the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4403
4404*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4405
4406The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4407buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4408
4409*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4410
4411The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4412contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4413`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4414have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4415enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4416at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4417more.
4418
4419*** Support for the varioref package
4420
4421The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4422
4423*** New hooks
4424
4425Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4426and citations are created. These hooks are
4427`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4428`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4429
4430*** Citations outside LaTeX
4431
4432The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4433a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4434
4435*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4436
4437The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4438fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4439fontified, use
4440
4441 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4442
4443** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4444With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4445the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4446directories that contain the same file name.
4447
4448Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4449Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4450file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4451Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4452have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4453names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4454directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4455directory.
4456
4457** New modes and packages
4458
4459*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4460It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4461it, but some do not.
4462
4463*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4464code.
4465
4466*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4467current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4468around in a buffer.
4469
4470Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4471
4472*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4473uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4474be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4475established system of notation similar to Chess.
4476
4477*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4478documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4479guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4480
4481*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4482available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4483system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4484simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4485functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4486the like.
4487
4488*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4489identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4490
4491*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4492within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4493used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4494the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4495
4496*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4497
4498 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4499 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4500 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4501 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4502 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4503 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4504 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4505 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4506 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4507 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4508 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4509
4510 Platform-specific modes:
4511
4512 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4513 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4514 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4515 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4516 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4517 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4518 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4519 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4520 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4521\f
4522* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4523
4524** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4525use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4526That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4527Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4528
4529Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4530you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4531consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4532
4533** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4534and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4535specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4536searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4537
4538** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4539multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4540character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4541environment.
4542
4543** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4544take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4545string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4546current input method for reading this one event.
4547
4548** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4549now control whether to output certain characters as
4550backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4551non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4552characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4553in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4554\f
4555* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4556
4557** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4558of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4559
4560** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4561in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4562always increases point by 1.
4563
4564The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4565considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4566
4567See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4568
4569** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4570Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4571default value changed. For example,
4572
4573 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4574 :type 'integer
4575 :group 'foo
4576 :version "20.3")
4577
79214ddf 4578 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4579 :version "20.3")
4580
4581If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4582default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4583is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4584`:version' in the top level group.
4585
4586This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4587
4588** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4589starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4590
4591However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4592symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4593support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4594to themselves.
4595
4596If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4597this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4598values whatever.
4599
4600** There is a new debugger command, R.
4601It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4602in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4603
4604** Frame-local variables.
4605
4606You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4607the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4608local bindings for that variable.
4609
4610These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4611frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4612modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4613parameter name.
4614
4615Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4616Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4617active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4618that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4619
4620It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4621clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4622very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4623through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4624
4625** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4626"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4627evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4628makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4629See the documentation in sregex.el.
4630
4631** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4632is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4633parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4634The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4635
4636** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4637If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4638
4639** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4640known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4641define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4642
4643** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4644when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4645it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4646history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4647
4648The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4649return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4650empty input.
4651
4652** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4653for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4654`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4655Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4656`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4657
4658** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4659echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4660a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4661default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4662
4663** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4664specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4665function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4666place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4667non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4668
4669** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4670If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4671up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4672end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4673
4674** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4675which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4676If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4677
4678** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4679holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4680was directed to display this buffer.
4681
4682** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4683with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4684describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4685other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4686set-window-configuration.
4687
4688** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4689window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4690positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4691windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4692
4693** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4694override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4695look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4696
4697If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4698non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4699map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4700
4701minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4702and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4703
4704** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4705except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4706
4707** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4708USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4709floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4710
4711** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4712to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4713in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4714it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4715
4716** Menu changes
4717
4718*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4719keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4720better supported.
4721
4722The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4723a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4724you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4725can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4726then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4727
4728*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4729
4730In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4731 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4732defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4733starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4734
4735The format is:
4736 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4737 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4738where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4739string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4740The supported properties include
4741
4742:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4743 item is enabled.
4744:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4745 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4746:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4747 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4748 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4749 It should return a binding to use instead.
4750:keys DESCRIPTION
4751 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4752 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4753 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4754:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4755 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4756 keyboard binding.
4757:key-sequence nil
4758 This means that the command normally has no
4759 keyboard equivalent.
4760:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4761:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4762 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4763 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4764 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4765
4766Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4767Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4768
4769(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4770
4771** New event types
4772
4773*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4774mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4775corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4776which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4777
4778 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4779
4780where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4781same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4782indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4783negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4784the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4785forward, away from the user.
4786
4787As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4788
4789*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4790files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4791and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4792filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4793loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4794
4795 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4796
4797where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4798same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4799that were dragged and dropped.
4800
4801As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4802
4803** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4804
4805*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4806any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4807to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4808
4809*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4810can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4811that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4812
4813*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4814in Emacs 19 and before.
4815
4816The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4817The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4818
4819*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4820buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4821unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4822representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4823
4824This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4825as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4826viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4827one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4828will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4829
4830This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4831representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4832(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4833consistent with the new representation.
4834
4835*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4836representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4837about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4838however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4839
4840The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4841nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4842using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4843
4844*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4845representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4846representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4847
4848The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4849loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4850is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4851
4852*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4853which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4854
4855*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4856which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4857
4858*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4859portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4860so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4861You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4862
4863*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4864it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4865
4866*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4867convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4868buffer or string being searched.
4869
4870One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4871[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4872searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4873searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4874obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4875you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4876expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4877
4878*** Structure of coding system changed.
4879
4880All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4881by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4882which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4883as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4884vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4885your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4886define-coding-system-alias.
4887
4888The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4889the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4890access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4891pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4892character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4893safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4894'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4895`iso-8859-1'.
4896
4897Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4898The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4899coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4900(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4901
4902Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4903also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4904are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4905the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4906
4907*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4908proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4909This function requires a user interaction.
4910
4911*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4912find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4913select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4914systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4915a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4916select-safe-coding-system.
4917
4918*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4919decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4920last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4921was done.
4922
4923*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4924used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4925coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4926
4927*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4928return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4929characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4930`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4931
4932*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4933coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4934coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4935converted.
4936
4937*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4938coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4939
4940*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4941character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4942character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4943each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4944either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4945range of characters.
4946
4947*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4948Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4949
4950*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4951in the current buffer at position POS.
4952
4953*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4954input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4955function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4956character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4957event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4958binding input-method-function to nil.
4959
4960The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4961method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4962input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4963the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4964not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4965
4966The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4967subsequent events of a key sequence.
4968
4969*** You can customize any language environment by using
4970set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4971
4972The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4973customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4974instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4975environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4976exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4977\f
4978* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4979
4980** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4981options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4982at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4983tree structure.
4984
4985M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4986user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4987
4988With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4989session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4990in your .emacs file.)
4991
4992** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4993You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4994
4995** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4996This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4997
4998** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4999immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5000kills the region.
5001
5002The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5003delete the character before point, as usual.
5004
5005** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5006on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5007by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5008
5009** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5010insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5011the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5012onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5013history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5014past.)
5015
5016** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5017This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5018in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5019TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5020makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5021
5022As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5023and is an alias for it.
5024
5025If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5026use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5027
5028** Scrolling changes
5029
5030*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5031position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5032
5033In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5034on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5035where it started.
5036
5037*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5038move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5039screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5040does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5041
5042*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5043top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5044comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5045recenters the window.
5046
5047** International character set support (MULE)
5048
5049Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5050including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5051Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5052Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5053features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5054MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5055
5056Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5057coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5058character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5059variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5060into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5061
5062Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5063generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5064supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5065language, to make it possible to type them.
5066
5067The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5068character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5069
5070The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5071to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5072
5073You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5074
5075 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5076
5077Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5078characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5079argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5080already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5081characters for their work until they want to change.
5082
5083*** Input methods
5084
5085An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5086specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5087has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5088the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5089support several input methods.
5090
5091The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5092another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5093work.
5094
5095A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5096characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5097composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5098consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5099sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5100letter.
5101
5102The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5103by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5104First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5105marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5106mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5107
5108None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5109they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5110phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5111converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5112
5113Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5114word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5115typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5116the first guess is wrong.
5117
5118*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5119turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5120
5121If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5122byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5123they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5124the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5125
5126However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5127use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5128includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5129translate automatically to and from either one.
5130
5131*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5132
5133Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5134file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5135sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5136what you want.
5137
5138If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5139example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5140system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5141multibyte characters in that buffer.
5142
5143If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5144character conversion as well.
5145
5146*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5147
5148A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5149Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5150requires using many fonts.
5151
5152Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5153collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5154
5155A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5156the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5157have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5158you would use a font.
5159
5160If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5161specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5162display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5163
5164The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5165(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5166characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5167or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5168and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5169
5170*** Defining fontsets.
5171
5172Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5173chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5174with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5175
5176Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5177of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5178`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5179standard fontset are created automatically.
5180
5181If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5182argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5183FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5184with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5185name is `fontset-startup'.
5186
5187Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5188The resource value should have this form:
5189 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5190FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5191 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5192 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5193 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5194The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5195of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5196CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5197FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5198
5199Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5200last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5201You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5202
5203For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5204font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5205following resource,
5206 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5207the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5208 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5209Here is the substitution rule:
5210 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5211 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5212 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5213 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5214 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5215
5216The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5217fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5218that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5219
5220With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5221like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5222name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5223fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5224fontsets.
5225
5226*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5227defaults for a particular choice of language.
5228
5229Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5230method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5231visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5232already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5233language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5234system for new files that you create.
5235
5236It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5237set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5238whole Emacs session.
5239
5240For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5241chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5242with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5243
5244*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5245specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5246specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5247the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5248coding systems that Emacs supports.
5249
5250*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5251lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5252This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5253After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5254is used for *the immediately following command*.
5255
5256So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5257write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5258
5259If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5260then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5261
5262For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5263visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5264
5265*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5266construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5267to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5268specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5269of the file.
5270
5271*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5272the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5273code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5274translated into that character code.
5275
5276This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5277various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5278
5279By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5280
5281*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5282the coding system for keyboard input.
5283
5284Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5285with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5286some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5287
5288By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5289
5290Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5291input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5292translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5293to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5294designed to work with terminals.
5295
5296*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5297specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5298This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5299has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5300translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5301in the corresponding buffer.
5302
5303By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5304
5305*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5306to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5307It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5308
5309*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5310an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5311command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5312want to use.
5313
5314C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5315method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5316
5317*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5318layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5319remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5320which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5321
5322*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5323the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5324related information.
5325
5326*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5327HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5328scripts.
5329
5330*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5331information about the support for a particular language.
5332You specify the language as an argument.
5333
5334*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5335the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5336first dash.
5337
5338A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5339(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5340whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
53411 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5342
5343 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5344 B big5 (Chinese)
5345 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5346 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5347 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5348 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5349 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5350 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5351 K euc-korea (Korean)
5352 R koi8 (Russian)
5353 Q tibetan
5354 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5355 T lao
5356 T tis620 (Thai)
5357 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5358 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5359 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5360 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5361 z hz (Chinese)
5362
5363When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5364two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5365coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5366keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5367
5368*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5369conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5370
5371When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5372into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5373rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5374Rmail files themselves.
5375
5376*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5377conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5378
5379Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5380for sending mail:
5381
5382- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5383- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5384- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5385 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5386- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5387
5388*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5389to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5390Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5391translations.
5392
5393** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5394of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5395insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5396without any conversion.
5397
5398** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5399You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5400RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5401any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5402
5403** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5404functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5405
5406Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5407Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5408
5409Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5410mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5411
5412** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5413complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5414in the buffer before point.
5415
5416With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5417symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5418you are using.
5419
5420With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5421just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5422
5423** File locking works with NFS now.
5424
5425The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5426in the same directory as FILENAME.
5427
5428This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5429works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5430can become a bottleneck.
5431
5432The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5433does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5434create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5435file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5436rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5437so useful that the change is worth while.
5438
5439When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5440are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5441collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5442tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5443
5444** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5445it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5446show-paren-mode.
5447
5448** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5449selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5450delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5451
5452** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5453within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5454complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5455
5456** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5457it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5458set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5459
5460** Changes in View mode.
5461
5462*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5463Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5464
5465*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5466view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5467
5468*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5469previous state.
5470
5471*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5472scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5473
5474*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5475non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5476not just the selected window.
5477
5478*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5479read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5480turns View mode on or off.
5481
5482*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5483how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5484delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5485
5486** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5487now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5488
5489** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5490has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5491presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5492which version to compare with.
5493
5494** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5495blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5496
5497The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5498is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5499isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5500shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5501
5502By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5503of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5504blocks, all of them or none.
5505
5506** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5507current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5508confirmation first.
5509
5510** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5511now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5512However, the mode will not be changed if
5513(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5514(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5515 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5516(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5517
5518This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5519
5520However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5521these commands do not change the major mode.
5522
5523** M-x occur changes.
5524
5525*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5526it performs a case-sensitive search.
5527
5528*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5529if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5530using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5531
5532** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5533in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5534window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5535that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5536buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5537
5538** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5539after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5540appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5541come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5542
5543** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5544selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5545buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5546
5547** Outline mode changes.
5548
5549*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5550
5551*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5552
5553** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5554you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5555Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5556was already active.
5557
5558The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5559unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5560get confused by it.
5561
5562If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5563set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5564
5565** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5566
5567*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5568conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5569character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5570including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5571
5572The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5573mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5574copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5575
5576*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5577are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5578values.
5579
5580`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5581case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5582`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5583case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5584
5585** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5586certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5587can be. The default value is 30.
5588
5589** Changes in Mail mode.
5590
5591*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5592Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5593composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5594`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5595`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5596behavior.
5597
5598C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5599compose-mail-other-frame.
5600
5601*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5602the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5603replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5604buffer that shows the original message.
5605
5606*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5607with separator lines around the contents.
5608
5609*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5610in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5611definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5612need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5613
5614*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5615
5616**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5617for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5618controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5619Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5620
5621**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5622to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5623/etc/passwd.
5624
5625**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5626to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5627/etc/passwd.
5628
5629** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5630special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5631directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5632reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5633
5634Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5635when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5636be taken to be magic.
5637
5638** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5639files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5640available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5641
5642M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5643(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5644
5645** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5646suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5647
5648In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5649
5650new key dired.el binding old key
5651------- ---------------- -------
5652 * c dired-change-marks c
5653 * m dired-mark m
5654 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5655 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5656 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5657 * u dired-unmark u
5658 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5659 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5660 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5661 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5662 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5663 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5664
5665** Rmail changes.
5666
5667*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5668saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5669chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5670each time you run it.
5671
5672*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5673whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5674
5675*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5676messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5677means to move in the opposite direction.
5678
5679*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5680you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5681
5682*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5683just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5684It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5685can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5686for output.
5687
5688** Gnus changes.
5689
5690*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5691
79214ddf
FP
5692*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5693Gnus.
a933dad1 5694
79214ddf 5695*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5696`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5697
5698*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5699article mode line.
5700
5701*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5702
5703*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5704
5705(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5706
5707*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5708are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5709`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5710
5711*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5712
5713*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5714
5715*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5716See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5717
5718*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5719Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5720used to pick articles.
5721
5722*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5723another have been added.
5724
5725 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5726
5727*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5728generating lines in buffers.
5729
5730*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5731`M-C-_'.
5732
5733*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5734
5735*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5736
5737 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5738
5739*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5740
a933dad1
DL
5741 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5742
5743*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5744Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5745
5746*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5747the native server.
5748
5749 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5750
5751*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5752(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5753
5754*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5755
5756*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5757even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5758
5759*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5760(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5761
5762 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5763 a group.
5764
5765*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5766sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5767
5768 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5769
5770*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5771
5772 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5773
5774*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5775
a933dad1
DL
5776 Use the `Y c' command.
5777
5778*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5779
5780*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5781
5782 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5783
5784*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5785from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5786
a933dad1
DL
5787 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5788
5789*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5790
5791*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5792the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5793
5794 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5795
5796Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5797and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5798from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5799hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5800this issue.)
5801
5802Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5803automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5804particular news group. This can be done by:
5805
5806 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5807
5808Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5809of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5810"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5811system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5812for reading and posting).
5813
5814CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5815 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5816Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5817newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5818there.
5819
5820Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5821default. Here are some of these default settings:
5822
5823 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5824 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5825 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5826 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5827 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5828
5829When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5830the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5831
5832** CC mode changes.
5833
5834*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5835code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5836values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5837this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5838Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5839loaded.
5840
5841If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5842Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5843style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5844share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5845c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5846must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5847
5848*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5849of the current buffer.
5850
5851*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5852it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5853of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5854
5855*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5856style that the Python developers like.
5857
5858*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5859This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5860just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5861
5862** VC Changes [new]
5863
5864** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5865name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5866directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5867
5868This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5869master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5870developers.
5871
5872You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5873RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5874
5875*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5876other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5877writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5878calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5879
5880*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5881version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5882
5883** Calendar changes.
5884
5885A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5886of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5887for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5888
5889** ps-print changes
5890
79214ddf 5891There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5892
5893*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5894
5895The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5896formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5897`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5898`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5899It defaults to `letter'.
5900If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5901
5902The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5903of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5904non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5905
5906The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5907It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5908It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5909
5910*** Horizontal layout
5911
5912The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5913`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5914All are measured in points.
5915
5916*** Vertical layout
5917
5918The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5919`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5920All are measured in points.
5921
5922*** Headers
5923
5924If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5925`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5926margin above the text.
5927
79214ddf 5928If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5929framing box is printed around the header.
5930
5931The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5932`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5933
79214ddf
FP
5934The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5935`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5936`ps-header-font-size'.
5937
5938*** Font managing
5939
5940The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5941used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5942`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5943elements to this alist.
5944
79214ddf 5945The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5946for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5947
5948** hideshow changes.
5949
5950*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5951C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5952
5953*** Support for java-mode added.
5954
5955*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5956in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5957
5958*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5959the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5960way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5961
5962*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5963robust and a lot faster.
5964
79214ddf 5965*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5966
5967*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5968to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5969documentation for more details.
5970
5971** Changes in Enriched mode.
5972
5973*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5974filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5975of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5976use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5977the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5978
5979*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5980distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5981as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5982as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5983
5984** Font Lock mode
5985
5986*** Custom support
5987
5988The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5989font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5990faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5991group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5992your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5993consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5994
5995You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5996
5997*** Maximum decoration
5998
5999Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6000default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6001of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6002supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6003to get the old behavior.
6004
6005*** New support
6006
6007Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6008
6009Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6010support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6011
6012*** Configurable support
6013
6014Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6015additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6016c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6017java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6018list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6019of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6020convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6021
6022Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6023way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6024it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6025
6026*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6027
6028You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6029highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6030for any mode.
6031
6032For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6033
6034 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6035
6036in your ~/.emacs.
6037
6038*** New faces
6039
6040Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6041font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6042distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6043to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6044
6045*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6046
6047The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6048cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6049same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6050
6051*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6052
6053The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6054according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6055the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6056non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6057refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6058the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6059Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6060
6061This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6062For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6063this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6064refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6065containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6066the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6067
6068As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6069
6070Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6071Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6072Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6073new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6074
6075If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6076settings.
6077
6078** Ada mode changes.
6079
6080*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6081If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6082procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6083you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6084stubs.
6085
6086*** There are two new commands:
6087 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6088 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6089
6090The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6091`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6092`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6093
6094*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6095is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6096Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6097
6098*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6099formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6100places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6101space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6102
6103** Scheme mode changes.
6104
6105*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6106mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6107for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6108with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6109have any effect.
6110
6111If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6112still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6113scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6114variables as buffer-local variables.
6115
6116*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6117Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6118
133c9e59
GM
6119** Changes to the emacsclient program
6120
875c1439
GM
6121*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6122USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6123associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6124can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6125
133c9e59 6126*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6127it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6128buffer in Emacs.
6129
133c9e59
GM
6130*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6131use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6132ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6133option takes precedence.
6134
a933dad1
DL
6135** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6136constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6137(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6138
6139** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6140which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6141the current defun.
6142
6143** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6144following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6145
6146** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6147and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6148necessary).
6149
6150** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6151if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6152these register values no longer become completely useless.
6153If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6154asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6155it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6156
6157** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6158example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6159be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6160you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6161
6162You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6163variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6164file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6165revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6166only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6167
6168** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6169since it applies only to the current frame.
6170
6171** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6172file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6173and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6174
6175This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6176multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6177variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6178tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6179instead of just the file you are editing.
6180
6181** RefTeX mode
6182
6183RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6184and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6185different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6186multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6187turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6188
79214ddf 6189C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6190 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6191 knows which kind of label is needed.
6192
6193C-c ) reftex-reference
6194 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6195 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6196
6197C-c [ reftex-citation
6198 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6199 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6200
6201C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6202 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6203
6204C-c = reftex-toc
6205 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6206 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6207
a933dad1
DL
6208Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6209commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6210Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6211reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6212C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6213
6214** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6215
6216*** Info documentation is now available.
6217
6218*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6219both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6220
6221*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6222bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6223
6224*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6225(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6226
6227*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6228entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6229appropriate functions.
6230
6231*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6232entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6233
6234*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6235been cleaned.
6236
6237*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6238bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6239
6240*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6241shall be delimited.
6242
6243*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6244bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6245bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6246
6247*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6248field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6249prefixed with `ALT'.
6250
6251*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6252bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6253formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6254documentation).
6255
6256*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6257documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6258for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6259
6260*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6261comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6262
6263*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6264alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6265signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6266
6267*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6268
6269*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6270
6271*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6272from alien sources.
6273
6274*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6275to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6276crossref entries.
6277
6278*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6279region.
6280
6281*** Added support for imenu.
6282
6283*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6284of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6285`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6286`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6287
6288*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6289from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6290
6291** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6292
30a009a5 6293** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6294
a933dad1
DL
6295** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6296functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6297Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6298as an argument.
6299
6300When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6301and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6302
6303** browse-url changes
6304
6305*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6306Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6307(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6308non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6309customization variables.
6310
6311*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6312
6313*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6314lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6315(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6316
6317** Changes in Ediff
6318
6319*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6320pops up the Info file for this command.
6321
6322*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6323the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6324merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6325directories).
6326
6327*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6328and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6329files in the same directory.
6330
6331*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6332The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6333related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6334
6335** Changes in Viper
6336
6337*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6338*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6339 instead of vip-.
6340*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6341*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6342Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6343*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6344*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6345*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6346color when Viper is in insert state.
6347*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6348Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6349viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6350
6351** Etags changes.
6352
6353*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6354default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6355Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6356variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6357not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6358
6359*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6360
6361*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6362constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6363
6364*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6365recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6366In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6367
6368*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6369C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6370recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6371methods and protocols.
6372
6373*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6374.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6375column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6376paragraph name.
6377
6378*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6379an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6380at least M times and as many as N times.
6381
6382** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6383in files has changed slightly.
6384
6385With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6386time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6387This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6388with old time-stamp-format values.
6389
6390In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6391(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6392This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6393reasons.
6394
6395In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6396natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6397fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6398(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6399time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6400specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6401
6402Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6403case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6404truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6405
6406The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6407being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6408future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6409recommended now will continue to work then.
6410
6411See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6412details.
6413
6414** There are some additional major modes:
6415
6416dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6417m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6418meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6419
6420** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6421copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6422into Emacs.
6423
6424** New Lisp packages include:
6425
6426*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6427
6428*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6429be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6430
6431*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6432
6433*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6434in shell buffers.
6435
6436*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6437See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6438and `elint-defun'.
6439
6440*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6441meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6442ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6443strings or comments.
6444
6445These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6446abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6447you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6448insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6449at these points.
6450
6451*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6452can visit them by short forms of their names.
6453
6454*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6455Emacs Lisp function at point.
6456
6457*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6458
6459*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6460switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6461
6462*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6463
6464*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6465
6466*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6467
6468*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6469from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6470
6471*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6472You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6473inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6474original place after inserting the copy.
6475
6476*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6477on the buffer.
6478
6479You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6480velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6481(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6482
6483Enable mouse-drag with:
6484 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6485-or-
6486 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6487
6488*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6489mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6490
6491*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6492It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6493
6494*** ogonek
6495
6496The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6497Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6498platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6499TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6500ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6501prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6502instance) and vice versa.
6503
6504To use this package load it using
6505 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6506Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6507 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6508 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6509The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6510ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6511
6512*** Interface to ph.
6513
6514Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6515
6516The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6517services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6518these servers.
6519
6520*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6521
6522*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6523You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6524while the real cursor does not move.
6525
6526*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6527for visiting your favorite web sites.
6528
6529*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6530so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6531
6532** movemail change
6533
6534Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6535mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6536supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6537user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6538
6539This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6540\f
6541* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6542
6543** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6544
6545Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6546end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6547Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6548file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6549file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6550
6551To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6552C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6553coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6554specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6555LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6556save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6557\f
6558* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6559
6560** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6561Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6562vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6563Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6564
6565** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6566to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6567
6568In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6569don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6570"win".
6571
6572** Basic Lisp changes
6573
6574*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6575evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6576
6577*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6578be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6579or by the user.
6580
6581The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6582
6583*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6584
6585(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6586(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6587
6588*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6589usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6590its argument.
6591
6592*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6593
6594*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6595
6596*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6597
6598*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6599error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6600include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6601`format' function.
6602
6603*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6604or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6605whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6606
6607*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6608either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6609adding one of these suffixes.
6610
6611*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6612which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6613If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6614
6615We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6616because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6617
6618*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6619
6620*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6621You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6622
6623*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6624conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6625
6626 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6627
6628BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6629BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6630
6631*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6632choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6633restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6634works using `save-current-buffer'.
6635
6636*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6637write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6638of the last form.
6639
6640*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6641which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6642last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6643as the last form.
6644
6645*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6646characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6647matches.
6648
6649For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6650
6651*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6652with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6653Then it returns that string.
6654
6655For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6656
6657(with-output-to-string
6658 (princ "The buffer is ")
6659 (princ (buffer-name)))
6660
6661returns "The buffer is foo".
6662
6663** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6664is non-nil.
6665
6666These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6667buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6668characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6669
6670*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6671a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6672
6673Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6674character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6675Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6676position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6677characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6678 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6679
6680ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6681Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6682non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6683characters".
6684
6685The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6686through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6687"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6688range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6689leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6690
6691*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6692(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6693multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6694character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6695
6696This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6697always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6698
6699However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6700
a933dad1
DL
6701*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6702because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6703have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6704the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6705guaranteed.
6706
6707*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6708between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6709character).
6710
6711When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6712
6713 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6714 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6715 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6716 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6717 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6718
6719*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6720
6721*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6722`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6723more than the number of characters.
6724
6725You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6726it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6727\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6728is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6729follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6730newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6731
6732*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6733and returns a string containing those characters.
6734
6735*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6736(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6737counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6738character, sref signals an error.
6739
6740*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6741in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6742string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6743
6744*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6745in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6746region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6747
6748*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6749the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6750to a vector of the characters in it.
6751
6752*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6753of a string. You call it as follows:
6754
6755 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6756
6757This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6758STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6759This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6760Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6761it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6762
6763*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6764if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6765
6766*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6767if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6768
6769*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6770to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6771not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6772which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6773
6774(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6775
6776This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6777
6778The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6779If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6780are not included in the resulting value.
6781
6782The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6783at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6784WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6785is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6786
6787If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6788place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6789character extends across that column), then the padding character
6790PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6791string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6792column START-COLUMN.
6793
6794*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6795the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6796necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6797difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6798changed text, before the change.
6799
6800*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6801sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6802one character set for each script, not for each language.
6803
6804**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6805
6806**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6807
6808**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6809set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6810
6811**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6812name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6813which identify the character within that character set.
6814
6815**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6816byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6817opposite of split-char.
6818
6819**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6820of all the characters between BEG and END.
6821
6822**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6823of all the characters in a string.
6824
6825*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6826and specifying coding systems.
6827
6828**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6829system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6830of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6831(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6832and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6833as what to do about code conversion.)
6834
6835**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6836name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6837
6838**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6839for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6840except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6841
6842Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6843which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6844to match against a file name.
6845
6846VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6847a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6848decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6849to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6850systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6851specifies the coding system for encoding.
6852
6853If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6854or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6855
6856**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6857the coding system to use for network sockets.
6858
6859Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6860which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6861either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6862service names.
6863
6864VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6865a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6866decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6867to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6868systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6869specifies the coding system for encoding.
6870
6871If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6872or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6873
6874**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6875for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6876except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6877start the subprocess.
6878
6879**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6880systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6881when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6882(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6883to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6884
6885**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6886coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6887subprocess.
6888
6889It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6890but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6891start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6892connection permanently or until overridden.
6893
6894The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6895file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6896network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6897coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6898It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6899system for one operation at a time.
6900
6901**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6902files, subprocesses or network connections.
6903
6904**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6905coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6906The value is a cons cell,
6907 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6908where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6909the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6910input to the subprocess.
6911
6912**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6913change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6914
6915** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6916customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6917you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6918
6919You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6920variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6921information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6922legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6923customization.
6924
6925Thus, instead of writing
6926
6927 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6928 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6929
6930you would now write this:
6931
6932 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6933 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6934 :type 'boolean
6935 :group foo)
6936
6937The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6938two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6939describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6940for a description of them.
6941
6942The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6943should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6944
6945 (defgroup ispell nil
6946 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6947 :group 'processes)
6948
6949The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6950group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6951but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6952to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6953second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6954
6955Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6956package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6957have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6958package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6959first-level subgroups.
6960
6961** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6962
6963This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6964separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6965
6966** easy-mmode
6967
6968The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6969developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6970only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6971predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6972`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6973`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6974
6975** Text property changes
6976
6977*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6978text property.
6979
6980*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6981previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6982place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6983functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6984starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6985
6986If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6987LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6988of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6989position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6990
6991*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6992value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6993is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6994
6995** Changes in invisibility features
6996
6997*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6998hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6999is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7000should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7001would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7002make the overlay visible.
7003
7004During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7005invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7006needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7007which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7008the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7009t when it should hide it.
7010
7011*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7012
7013Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7014invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7015and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7016Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7017manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7018Here is an example of how to do this:
7019
7020 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7021 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7022 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7023 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7024
7025 ...
7026 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7027
7028 ...
7029 ;; When done with the overlays:
7030 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7031 ;; Or respectively:
7032 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7033
7034** Changes in syntax parsing.
7035
7036*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7037`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7038obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7039`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7040
7041If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7042is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7043used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7044
7045When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7046character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7047
7048 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7049 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7050
7051 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7052 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7053 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7054
7055 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7056 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7057 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7058 determine the syntax type of the character.
7059
7060 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7061 of the current buffer.
7062
7063*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7064value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7065for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7066
7067*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7068and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7069only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7070character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7071another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7072
7073These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7074text property.
7075
7076*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7077arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7078of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7079
7080*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7081(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7082element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7083nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7084string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7085
7086*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7087syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7088`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7089
7090** Changes in face features
7091
7092*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7093if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7094
7095*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7096of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7097
7098*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7099set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7100
7101*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7102set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7103
7104*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7105by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7106and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7107the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7108overlay property).
7109
7110This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7111arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7112
7113** Changes in file-handling functions
7114
7115*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7116directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7117they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7118is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7119
7120This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7121begins with ~.
7122
7123*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7124it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7125
7126*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7127the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7128
7129*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7130as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7131
7132*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7133character code conversion as well as other things.
7134
7135Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7136(formerly it did not).
7137
7138*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7139environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7140
7141*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7142instead of constant strings.
7143
7144*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7145to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7146any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7147
7148substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7149in the same way as before.
7150
7151*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7152The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7153which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7154
7155*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7156error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7157else, and returns nil.
7158
7159*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7160directory cannot be listed.
7161
7162** Changes in minibuffer input
7163
7164*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7165read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7166additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7167argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7168ways:
7169
7170 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7171 It is available through the history command M-n.
7172
7173*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7174read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7175argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7176minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7177enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7178
7179In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7180argument in this way.
7181
7182*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7183from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7184minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7185
7186** Echo area features
7187
7188*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7189echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7190minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7191after the echo area is cleared.
7192
7193*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7194in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7195
7196** Keyboard input features
7197
7198*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7199set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7200
7201*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7202received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7203by keyboard macros.
7204
7205** Frame-related changes
7206
7207*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7208creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7209hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7210
7211*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7212the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7213has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7214
7215*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7216selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7217value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7218in the selected frame.
7219
7220*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7221is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7222which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7223
7224** X Windows features
7225
7226*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7227x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7228x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7229
7230*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7231The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7232
7233*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7234MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7235A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7236
7237If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7238it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7239
7240** Subprocess features
7241
7242*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7243functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7244automatically.
7245
7246*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7247and returns the output from the command as a string.
7248
7249*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7250and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7251
7252** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7253does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7254
7255** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7256at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7257goes after the other menu items.
7258
7259** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7260of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7261around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7262are in use.
7263
7264The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7265series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7266
7267Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7268after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7269form.
7270
7271** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7272is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7273but its hook is still run.
7274
7275** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7276for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7277
7278If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7279regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7280useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7281
7282This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7283are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7284filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7285warned.
7286
7287** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7288way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7289
7290** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7291integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7292functions like display-time.
7293
7294** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7295name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7296
7297** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7298can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7299is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7300
7301** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7302if there is an error in compilation.
7303
7304** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7305switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7306argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7307they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7308
7309** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7310Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7311the *scratch* buffer.
7312
7313** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7314The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7315where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7316e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7317
7318** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7319and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7320It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7321
7322** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7323using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7324variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7325and compose-mail-other-frame.
7326
7327** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7328can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7329full name of the specified user will be returned.
7330
7331** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7332of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7333where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7334in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7335option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7336files at all.
7337
7338** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7339and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7340width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7341the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7342
7343For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7344minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7345with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7346is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7347
7348** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7349
7350** imenu.el changes.
7351
7352You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7353item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7354
7355An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7356#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7357select one of those items.
7358\f
7359* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7360\f
7361* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7362
7363** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7364mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7365
7366** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7367use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7368Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7369\f
7370* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7371
7372** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7373To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7374
7375** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7376conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7377matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7378expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7379word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7380all caps.
7381
7382** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7383at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7384
7385When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7386does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7387as in previous Emacs versions.
7388
7389** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7390non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7391time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7392frames.
7393
7394** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7395if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7396This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7397Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7398accident.
7399
7400** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7401keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7402It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7403line and then executing the macro.
7404
7405This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7406
7407** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7408(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7409characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7410characters.
7411
7412** Font Lock mode
7413
7414*** Font Lock support modes
7415
7416Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7417below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7418hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7419to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7420Font Lock mode is enabled.
7421
7422For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7423
7424 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7425
7426in your ~/.emacs.
7427
7428*** lazy-lock
7429
7430The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7431only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7432becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7433Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7434occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7435buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7436Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7437
7438To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7439
7440 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7441
7442To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7443
7444** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7445
7446*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7447paren and key.
7448
7449*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7450supported.
7451
7452** Gnus changes.
7453
7454Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7455commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7456significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7457previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7458
7459Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7460between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7461
79214ddf 7462*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7463variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7464obsolete.
7465
7466*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7467missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7468
7469 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7470
7471*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7472
7473 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7474
7475*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7476referred.
a933dad1
DL
7477
7478*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7479
7480 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7481
7482*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7483
7484 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7485
7486*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7487buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7488
7489 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7490
7491*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7492
7493 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7494
7495*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7496
7497 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7498
7499*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7500
7501 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7502
7503*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7504is possible.
7505
7506 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7507
7508*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7509groups of groups.
7510
7511*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7512
7513*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7514batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7515
7516*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7517
7518*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7519
7520*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7521
7522 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7523
7524*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7525expiration times.
7526
7527*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7528
7529*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7530process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7531
7532*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7533articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7534bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7535
7536*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7537articles with the `*' command.
7538
7539*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7540
7541*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7542
7543 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7544
7545*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7546
79214ddf 7547*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7548`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7549
7550*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7551buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7552
7553*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7554
7555*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7556
7557*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7558
7559 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7560
79214ddf 7561*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7562
7563 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7564
79214ddf 7565*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7566
7567*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7568
79214ddf 7569*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7570
79214ddf 7571 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7572 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7573
7574*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7575refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7576
7577 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7578
7579*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7580buffer to allow easier treatment.
7581
7582*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7583
7584*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7585
7586 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7587
7588*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7589articles.
a933dad1
DL
7590
7591 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7592
79214ddf 7593*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7594
7595*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7596cited text to hide is now customizable.
7597
7598 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7599
7600*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7601
7602 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7603
7604*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7605
7606*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7607
7608The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7609in greater detail.
7610\f
7611* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7612
7613** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7614second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7615asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7616exists.
7617
7618** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7619as well as lists.
7620
7621** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7622of a given keymap.
7623
7624** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7625given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7626keymap or nil.
7627
7628** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7629an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7630name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7631menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7632equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7633alias.
7634\f
7635* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7636
7637** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7638
7639Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7640This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7641was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7642far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7643pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7644
7645For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7646you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7647`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7648
7649** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7650
7651The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7652do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7653It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7654much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7655chapter of the manual for details.
7656
7657However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7658customization variables take effect.
7659
7660** Marking with the mouse.
7661
7662When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7663highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7664using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7665
7666** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7667
7668*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7669
7670*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7671to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7672
7673*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7674in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7675you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7676application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7677applications, these problems are significant.
7678
7679If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7680likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7681However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7682will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7683other DOS application as a subprocess.
7684
7685Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7686You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7687
7688If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7689subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7690have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7691Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7692separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7693Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7694
7695** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7696
7697This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7698which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7699minibuffer contains.
7700
7701** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7702
7703The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7704It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7705It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7706affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7707
7708The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7709it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7710and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7711when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7712
7713** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7714enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7715
7716** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7717F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7718Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7719
7720If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7721menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7722something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7723the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7724
7725 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7726
7727** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7728to replace the characters it "deletes".
7729
7730** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7731
7732** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7733a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7734select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7735It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7736immediately after the selected one.
7737
7738This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7739made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7740
7741** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7742
7743Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7744directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7745If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7746Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7747recover-session.
7748
7749You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7750auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7751will not work.
7752
7753Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7754normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7755this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7756bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7757now that the bug is fixed.
7758
7759** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7760
7761There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7762when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7763Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7764which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7765
7766If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7767telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7768VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7769the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7770
7771** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7772Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7773is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7774
7775There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7776Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7777enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7778The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7779remain normal.
7780
7781** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7782header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7783
7784Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7785known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7786offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7787Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7788
7789Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7790of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7791a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7792name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7793documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7794`mail-directory-stream'.)
7795
7796** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7797skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7798characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7799with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7800
7801Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7802- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7803wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7804
7805The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7806less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7807headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7808Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7809Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7810fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7811to a limitation in font-lock).
7812
7813External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7814
7815** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7816buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7817buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7818this example:
7819
7820 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7821 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7822
7823** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7824
7825*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7826
7827*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7828
7829*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7830
7831*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7832entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7833will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7834isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7835(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7836The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7837
7838*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7839does the same job.
7840
7841*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7842"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7843
7844*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7845text.
7846
7847** Font Lock mode
7848
7849*** Global Font Lock mode
7850
7851Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7852new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7853font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7854turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7855on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7856
7857For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7858
7859 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7860
7861in your ~/.emacs.
7862
7863*** Local Refontification
7864
7865In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7866However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7867those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7868command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7869
7870In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7871(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7872current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7873above and below point.
7874
7875With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7876
7877** Follow mode
7878
7879Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7880buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7881side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7882they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7883split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7884follow-mode.
7885
7886M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7887
7888To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7889command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7890
7891** hide-show changes.
7892
7893The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7894to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7895normal hooks.
7896
7897** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7898The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7899
7900** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7901recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7902those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7903
7904** MSDOS Changes
7905
7906*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7907Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7908
7909*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7910and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7911
7912*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7913
7914*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7915pressing both mouse buttons.
7916
7917*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7918restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7919are:
a933dad1
DL
7920
7921**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7922now works.
7923
7924**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7925
7926**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7927implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7928
7929**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7930
7931**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7932
7933**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7934
7935**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7936
7937**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7938\f
7939* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7940
7941** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7942tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7943remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7944this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7945behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7946
7947** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7948
7949The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7950not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7951need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7952be different.
7953
7954It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7955than `system-type'.
7956
7957See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7958
7959** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7960now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7961
7962** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7963that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7964
7965** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7966no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7967reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7968
7969The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7970to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7971like this:
7972
7973 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7974
7975SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7976It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7977becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7978
7979REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7980seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7981means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7982
7983*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7984up if too much time passes.
7985
7986 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7987
7988This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7989If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7990of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7991form in BODY.
7992
7993*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7994a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7995call looks like this:
7996
7997 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7998
7999SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8000runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8001timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8002ARGS.
8003
8004Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8005command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8006command.
8007
8008REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8009time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8010does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8011each time Emacs becomes idle.
8012
8013If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8014idle for SECS seconds.
8015
8016*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8017all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8018programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8019instead.
8020
8021*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8022there is no answer within a certain time.
8023
8024 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8025
8026asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8027within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8028Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8029
8030** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8031arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8032meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8033arguments in between are ignored.
8034
8035This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8036the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8037
8038** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8039/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8040/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8041site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8042version.
8043
8044It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8045version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8046for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8047has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8048and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8049problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8050
8051** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8052.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8053systems with limited file name syntax.
8054
8055Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8056convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8057for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8058completions.el:
8059
8060(defvar save-completions-file-name
8061 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8062 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8063
8064This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8065depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8066convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8067Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8068MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8069
8070** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8071rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8072minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8073
8074** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8075marker from its buffer position.
8076
8077** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8078Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8079The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8080
8081** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8082that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8083condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8084of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8085matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8086regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8087
8088This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8089errors that happen often during editing.
8090
8091** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8092into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8093puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8094
8095** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8096now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8097
8098** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8099a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8100name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8101to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8102and not get-buffer-window.
8103
8104** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8105calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8106being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8107
8108If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8109buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8110property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8111non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8112are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8113property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8114over and over for the same text.
8115
8116** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8117
8118*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8119in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8120
8121;; @(#) HEADER: text
8122;; $HEADER: text $
8123
8124in addition to the normal
8125
8126;; HEADER: text
8127
8128*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8129checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8130lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8131\f
8132* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8133
8134----------------------------------------------------------------------
8135Copyright information:
8136
404fa7d6 8137Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8138
8139 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8140 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8141 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8142 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8143
8144 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8145 of this document, or of portions of it,
8146 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8147 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8148\f
8149Local variables:
8150mode: outline
8151paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8152end: